Ariens 924049 Snow Blower User Manual

Ì81-2Ç:È-Ç)*FÎ
62697 09 Journey_OM.indd 1
$ISZTMFS--$
'JSTU&EJUJPO
1SJOUFEJO64"
9/28/07 2:14:10 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18
▫ FOB With Integrated Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Express Down Window Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .47
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder
System (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .77
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You
can insert the double-sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Fob With Integrated Key
The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob.
2
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other
hand.
Valet Key Removal
NOTE:
• You can insert the double-sided valet key into the lock
cylinder with either side up.
• Only the drivers door is equipped with a lock cylinder.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the key.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for
approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the
ignition switch.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones,
pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE transmitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electronics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and
the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with integrated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the
vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something
triggers the alarm, the system will prevent the vehicle
from starting, sound the horn intermittently, flash the
headlights and taillights, and flash the Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument cluster.
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after three
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Arm the System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the
vehicle.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door
LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE: The system will not arm if you lock the doors
with the manual door LOCK plungers or the door LOCK
cylinder on the driver’s door.
3. Close all doors. The Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds
to signal that the system is arming. During this period,
opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming
process. If the system arms successfully, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the
alarm is set.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
Alarm is armed, the HomeLink威/Garage Door Opener
(if equipped) is disabled as well.
To Disarm the System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door LOCK
plungers or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver’s
door will not disarm the system.
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
LOCK switches will not unlock the doors.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If the previously
described arming sequence has occurred, the system will
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the
vehicle. If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system.
The interior lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
• The illuminated entry system will not operate the
interior lights if the Dimmer Control is in the extreme
downward (Defeat) position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The interior lights will turn on when you press the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open a door or the liftgate.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
about 35 ft (11 m) using a hand-held radio transmitter.
The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if so
equipped). Refer to “Illumin Approach,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the
ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will
continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “RKE Unlock,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash
Light With Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with
the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Illumin Approach,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound
Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24
km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Express Down Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the unlock button on the transmitter and then
immediately press and hold the unlock button until the
windows lower to the level desired or until they lower
completely.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威, “Customer Key Programming.”
(See page 17 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the access door.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Battery Replacement
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
targeted range of 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transaxle to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle
is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
To prevent you from locking your key in the vehicle, the
power door lock switch will not operate when the key is
in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime will
sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transaxle is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
Power Door Lock Switch
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in Section 4.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK
2. Place the key in the ignition switch.
4. The driver’s door is opened
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the
engine.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door unlock
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock plunger up to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
WARNING!
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under “Personal
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
On some models, the driver’s power window switch has
an Auto-up feature. Pull the window switch up to the
second detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such entrapment may result in serious injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
other doors. To disable the window controls, press and
release the window lockout button (setting it in the down
position). To enable the window controls, press and
release the window lockout button again (setting it in the
up position).
Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or by activating the
power door lock switch located on either front door trim
panel.
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position.
Liftgate Release
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
• Supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes
could injure you and your passengers. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• Supplemental front seat mounted side airbags
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• Knee Bolsters/Blockers for front seat occupants
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety
features are standard on your vehicle:
• Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts to enhance occupant protection by managing
occupant energy during an impact event.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second
row center position) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs).
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
belts, your seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) feature can also be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are
designed to go around the large bones of your body. These
are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces
of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal
injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt.
People belted together can crash into one another in an
accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your
body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a
collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head
in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and
shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The driver and front passenger’s seat belts are equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
both must be replaced.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to buckle the seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat
belt is buckled. The BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: The manufacturer of this vehicle does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, (engine
does not need to be running). Wait for the Seat Belt
Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next
step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt, allow the seat belt to
retract, and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least
three times, ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while rebuckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to completely
retract the seat belt each time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled/retracted.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and younger should be properly restrained in
the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase
the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat
belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug
and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the extender when not needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the top of the instrument panel. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
1 — Driver’s Airbag
2 — Front Passenger’s Airbag
3 — Knee Bolsters
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle also has supplemental side curtain airbags to
protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window and supplemental front seat mounted side airbags.
The supplemental side curtain airbags are located above
the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS
AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The supplemental front seat mounted side airbags are
marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of
the seat.
Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label
Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The
area where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions. Do not have any
accessory items installed which will alter the roof,
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not
add roof racks that require permanent attachments
(bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof.
Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the supplemental front seat
mounted side airbags; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
• Do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating supplemental front
seat mounted side airbags could drive the object into
occupants, causing serious injury.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain
and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many
types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in
moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental
side curtain airbag and supplemental front seat mounted
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also
trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. However,
even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the
seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the
airbags to protect you properly.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buckled up in the rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to
information on Child Restraint in this section)
3. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger’s seat because the vehicle is crowded, move
the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section.)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
7. The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to
inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
8. Do not lean against the door, as the supplemental side
curtain airbags and supplemental front seat mounted
side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between
you and the door.
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Supplemental side curtain airbags and supplemental front seat mounted side airbags also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Side Remote Pressure and Acceleration Sensors
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags
• Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seat Belt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners
• Front Seat Track Position Sensors
How the Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. If airbags are required, the ORC
determines the necessary rate of airbag inflation for
that event.
• The ORC determines if a side impact is severe enough
to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag and
supplemental front seat mounted side airbag.
• The ORC detects rollover.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
• The ORC and other systems monitor the readiness of
the electronic components whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON position. These include
all of the items listed above except the knee impact
bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel
and column. Furthermore, the airbag system is not
active if the key is in the LOCK position, the ACC
position, or not in the ignition.
• The ORC commands Airbag Warning Light
operation. The Airbag Warning Light in the
instrument panel turns on for four to six
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, the light will turn on until the malfunction is
corrected. A single chime will sound if the light comes
on again after initial start-up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper passenger’s side of the instrument
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags
inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in about
50 to 70 ms. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The
inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The airbag inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter
of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only
about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
• The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags
are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a
collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag
to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front seat mounted side airbag. The inflating front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the
seam in the seat’s trim cover and opens into the space
• The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions. When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators
on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
between the occupant and the door. The airbag inflates
at a very high speed and with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the front seat
mounted side airbag inflates. This especially applies to
children.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered
to:
• Do not make any modifications to the front seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any
way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified
for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket
seat cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by the manufacturer of this vehicle/
Mopar威.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS-related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those, which are approved by the manufacturer of this vehicle/Mopar威.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front seat assembly, its related components, or
seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat
passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC
detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the
driver and front passenger and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle communication network intact, and the
power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System
performs the following functions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes hazard lights.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlocks the doors automatically.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the four to six seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
• The light remains on or flickers after the four to six
second interval.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by the manufacturer of this vehicle and others to
learn more about the possible causes of crashes and
associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle
performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated
by the manufacturer of this vehicle, such investigations
may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers,
such as those associated with universities, and with
hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by the
manufacturer of this vehicle (regardless of initiative), the
company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by the manufacturer of this
vehicle to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a product of the
manufacturer of this vehicle
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Traction/stability control status
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transaxle gear selection
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchor System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
New Integrated 1
3. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
2. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
4. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
5. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
8. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
6. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat
cushion could cause serious injury.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
7. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchor System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s second row passenger seats are equipped
with the child restraint anchor system called LATCH. The
LATCH system provides for the installation of the child
restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead
securing the child restraint using lower anchors and
upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchors are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchors will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
connection to the top tether anchors have been available
for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three second-row passenger seating positions have
lower anchors that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats
in adjacent seating positions, or if your child restraints
are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts.
Latch Anchorages
1 — Outer 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops A
and B. If placing a second child seat in the vehicle, use the
Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E.
DO NOT USE Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops B and C.
2 — Middle 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops B
and C. If placing a second child seat in the vehicle, use the
Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E.
DO NOT USE Outer 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops A and B.
3 — Outer 40% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops D
and E. If placing a second child seat in the vehicle, use Outer
60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B or
Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The lower anchors are round bars located at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind
each rear seatback, near to the floor.
2
Tether Strap Anchors
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchors. Next, attach
the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seatcover material. Then attach the tether strap to the
anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint, preferably between the head restraint
posts underneath the head restraint. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode” in this section.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
preferably between the head restraint posts underneath
the head restraint.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Strap Mounting
Seat Track Release Lever
• If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
• Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7. NONDETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the vehicle
with the second row passenger seat in the easy
entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and
seat moved forward), as this position is only intended
for entering and exiting the third row seats. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger
to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger could
slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make
sure that all windows are closed, and the blower switch
on the climate control is set at high speed. DO NOT use
the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for four to six
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, or if the
light stays on, flickers, or turns on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check Turn Signal and High
Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .91
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped . .92
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ UConnect威 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect威 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
䡵 Voice Recognition System — If Equipped . . . . . . 120
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . . 120
▫ Exterior And Interior Lighting Control . . . . . . 146
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . . 134
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven
Passenger Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . 147
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
▫ Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 159
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 159
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 167
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Opening Sunroof - Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Closing Sunroof - Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 176
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
䡵 Cup And Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . . 186
▫ Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Instrument Panel Storage Compartment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . . 188
▫ Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . 193
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . 195
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 196
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light will illuminate next to the switch when the
automatic dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
forward, rearward, and normal.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power MIRROR switch is located on driver’s door
trim panel.
Power MIRROR Switches
Models without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror SELECT button marked L or R and then
press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in
the direction the arrow is pointing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Models with Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror SELECT button marked L or
R and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move
the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The
selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order
to guard against accidentally changing a mirror position
following an adjustment.
3
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear
Window Defroster.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
NOTE: The video will only display while the shift lever
is in REVERSE.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACKUP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
The Parkview威 Rear Backup Camera captures live video
of the area behind the vehicle. The live video displays on
the radio’s display screen when backing up your vehicle.
WARNING!
NOTE: Refer to “Setting Display Properties,” under
“System Settings” in the Navigation User’s Manual for
navigation screen brightness adjustment instructions.
To operate the Rear Backup Camera:
1. Start the engine.
2. Move the shift lever into REVERSE.
3. Wait one to two seconds and the video will display on
the radio’s display screen.
Drivers must be careful when backing up a vehicle,
even when using the Rear Backup Camera. Always
check carefully for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up a vehicle. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up a vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, only use the Rear
Backup Camera as a parking aid, as the camera is
unable to capture every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, drive slowly when backing up a vehicle so that you can stop in time when
an obstacle comes into view. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over their shoulder
when backing up a vehicle.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios
contain an integrated Hands-Free Communication
(UConnect威) system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for UConnect威 system operating instructions
for these radios.
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect威 phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnect威 works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect威 system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect威 system. The priority allows the
UConnect威 system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect威
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial by Saying a Number
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect威 system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in
this section.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnect威 allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
Edit Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
Delete All Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• The selected number will be dialed.
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recognition” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnect姞 System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威 system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威
system.
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
• The UConnect威 phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak into
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as
possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and you can add or change commands. This will become
helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Global commands are available at all times.
Local commands are available if the supported radio
mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
• NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
• PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous channel)
• LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
• SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• TRACK (#) (to change the track)
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You continue by saying one of the following
commands:
− SAVE (to save the memo)
− CONTINUE (to continue recording)
− DELETE (to delete the recording)
• PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hardkey to stop playing memos. You continue by saying
one of the following commands:
− REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
− NEXT (to play the next memo)
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
− DELETE (to delete a memo)
• DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Forward and Rearward Adjustment
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in
the position desired. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
Recliner Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean forward slightly and lift the lever.
Then lean back to the position desired and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Seatback Release
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seatback.
Turn the control lever downward to increase the lumbar
support or upward to decrease the lumbar support as
desired.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The control lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever to
lower the seat. The total seat travel is 2.15 in (55 mm).
3
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Lumbar Control
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a
hardback surface that you can use as a work surface
when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in
motion.
Fold Flat Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Seatback Release
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat Switch
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under any seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear.
Front Seats
Adjust the head restraints so that the upper edge is as
high as practical. The left sleeve that the head restraint
post slides through contains a lock release button. You
can raise the head restraint without pressing this button.
However, you must press this button to lower the head
restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
• Do not sit in a seat or allow a passenger to sit in a
seat without having the head restraint installed
and adjusted properly. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to you or your
passenger in the event of an accident.
• Do not leave a head restraint that is removed from
a seat loose in the vehicle. A loose head restraint
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could
endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Adjustable Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, you must press the lock
release button on the left sleeve and the right sleeve
simultaneously. To reinstall the head restraint, insert the
posts into the sleeves and push the head restraint downward until it locks in place. Then, if desired, press the
button on the left sleeve and lower the head restraint.
Second Row Passenger Seats
These head restraints are non-adjustable and nonremovable.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and nonremovable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
Third-Row Passenger Seats with Fold-Flat Feature” for
operating instructions.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of an accident.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat are heated.
The controls for each heater are located in the switch
bank in the center of the instrument panel. After turning
ON the ignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off
heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for high, one for low, and none for off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
level heating is selected, the system automatically turns
the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of
continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements.
If high level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to low level heating and turns one indicator
light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If low
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the seat to fold easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the
passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
To Fold the Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
To Unfold the Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
Seatback Release
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Forward and Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the position desired. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
3
Seatback Release
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
20% Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger
Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the 20%
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop upward to release the latch and then downward to lower the 20%
seatback/armrest.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Latch Release-Loop
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Raise the 20% seatback/armrest and lock it in place when
not in use or when additional seating area is required.
WARNING!
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward, and in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
3
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move the Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the 20% seatback/armrest before moving
the 60% seat to allow for full seat travel.
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tip n Slide Seat™
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
Grab Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
To Unfold and Move the Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
2. Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats with
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if
needed.
3. Adjust the seat track position as desired. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seat,
make sure the second-row passenger seat is not in a
reclined position. This will allow the seat to fold easily.
1. Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold the Seat
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seat forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the seat
forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as
the seat moves forward.
To Unfold the Seat
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Then, raise the head
restraint to lock it in place.
Assist Strap
Seatback Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
The seatback can also be locked in a reclined position. To
do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of an accident.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever near
the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right and then
raise the hood.
Hood Release
Underhood Safety Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward
push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Prop Rod
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving. Failure to follow this warning may lead to an
accident resulting in serious injury or death.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Exterior and Interior Lighting Control
The multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,
interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system ON,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System OFF, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the automatic mode.
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights With Wipers,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in
Section 4.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after turning the
ignition switch to the LOCK position.
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn OFF the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn OFF the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights, or parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights OFF before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Headlight Off Delay,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at DRL (lower) intensity, whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running,
the HEADLIGHT switch is off, the parking brake is off,
the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any position
except PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when the turn signal is in operation and
turn on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn ON the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out on the end of the multifunction lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and
the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
Front Fog Light
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Turn Signal Control
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever upward
or downward partially without moving beyond the detent.
NOTE: If either turn signal indicator has a very fast
flash rate, check for an inoperative outside light bulb. If
an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, see
your authorized dealer for service.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever toward you,
to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Highbeam Control
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash to
Pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the Flash to Pass function again.
Interior Lights
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Models with Overhead Console
These lights are mounted in the overhead console between the sun visors. They are also located in the
headliner above the second row passenger seats. Press
and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light
manually. These lights also turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, open a door or the liftgate, or turn the
Dimmer Control completely upward to the second detent. For models equipped with LED lighting, you can
swivel the lens socket to direct the light as desired.
Models without Overhead Console
There are two courtesy/reading lights mounted in the
headliner between the sun visors. Press and release the
button next to the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light
manually. A courtesy light is also mounted in the headliner above the second row passenger seats. Press and
release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light
manually. These lights also turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, open a door or
the liftgate, or turn the Dimmer Control completely
upward to the second detent.
Cargo Light
This light is mounted in the liftgate trim panel. It turns on
when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, open a door or the liftgate, or turn the Dimmer
Control completely upward to the second detent.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically within 10 minutes of turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched ON manually or are on
because a door is open.
Dimmer Control
The Dimmer Control is part of the multifunction lever. It
controls the operation of the interior lights and the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Dimmer Control
Instrument Panel Dimming
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
Dimmer Control upward or downward to change the
brightness of the instrument panel lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the Dimmer Control to the first detent to brighten
the odometer and radio display when the parking lights
or headlights are on during daylight conditions.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The Windshield Wiper/Washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
Interior Light ON
Rotate the Dimmer Control completely upward to the
second detent to turn ON the interior lights.
3
NOTE: The Battery Saver feature will not activate until
the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. Refer to
“Battery Saver Feature” for additional information.
Interior Light Defeat OFF
Rotate the Dimmer Control completely downward to the
(O) OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation, or to
the second detent past the intermittent settings for high
speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park
position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they
are operating. The wipers will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the WIPER
switch and allow the wipers to return to the park
position before turning OFF the engine. If the
WIPER switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to
the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
park position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
park position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the Windshield Wiper/Washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are five delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles
every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph (16
km/h).
Mist Feature
Push downward on the Windshield Wiper/Washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
3
Mist Control
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the (A) AUTO position. In addition,
the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned
OFF if they were turned ON by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights With Wipers,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in
Section 4.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the Windshield Wiper/Washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTE: Refer to the “Engine Compartment” diagram in
Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
tilt/telescoping adjustment must be locked while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
or driving without the tile/telescoping adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the speed control lever. The
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will illuminate. To turn the system OFF, push
and release the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. Be sure to turn the
system OFF when not in use.
NOTE:
• The Electronic Speed Control System will automatically turn off when the engine is turned OFF.
• The Electronic Speed Control System is designed to
shut down if you operate multiple speed control
switch-functions simultaneously (i.e., Set and Cancel).
If this occurs, push and release the ON/OFF button to
reactivate the system and then reestablish the desired
Set speed.
Speed Control Lever
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press downward on the lever to SET DECEL and release. Release the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph (40
km/h) for the speed control to set.
• The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the lever to SET
DECEL.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the speed control
lever toward you to CANCEL, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning OFF the ignition
erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivate the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set
speed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUME
ACCEL and release, and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new set speed will be established.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6
km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the speed control is set, push
downward and hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new set
speed will be established.
Tapping SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6
km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror,
and an optional power sunroof switch.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Refer to “Courtesy/Reading Lights” under “Lights” in
Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console
and release and the door will swing downward.
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, first,
press on the raised bars on the compartment door and
release. The door will swing downward. Then, raise the
door until it is almost closed and release. The door will
latch in position to use the interior observation mirror.
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in Section 3.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink威 channels.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train
the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage
door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information
or assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with programming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Opening Sunroof - Manually
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Closing Sunroof - Manually
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two fused 12-Volt power outlets located in the
center console below the radio. The outlet on the top has
power available when the ignition switch in the ON or
ACC position. The outlet on the bottom has power
available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON, or
ACC position.
Front Power Outlets
1 — Switched Power
2 — Battery Power
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
A third fused 12-Volt power outlet is located on the back
of the center console. This outlet has power available
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or ACC
position.
A fourth fused 12-Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This outlet has
power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
3
Rear Power Outlet
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
POWER INVERTER — If EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150
Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of the
center console. This outlet can power small appliances
and electronic devices.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The control switch for the outlet is located in the switch
bank above the climate control.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Power Inverter Switch
Press and release the switch once to turn ON the power
outlet. A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in
approximately one second to indicate that power is
available at the outlet. Press and release the switch again
to turn OFF the power outlet. The status indicator will
also turn off.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUP AND BOTTLE HOLDERS
CUPHOLDERS
Armrest Cupholders
Center Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
BOTTLE HOLDERS
3
Quarter Trim Panel Cupholders
(Seven Passenger Models)
Door Bottle Holder
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
cooler is designed to hold up to two 12 oz (0.35 l) cans
when placed horizontally in the retainer. The beverage
retainer is removable to allow for storage of other items
in the compartment when not in use as a cooler.
STORAGE
Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
NOTE: The Beverage Cooler can keep chilled beverages
cool depending on ambient temperature and climate
control setting. The cooler is intended for non-perishable
beverages only.
The Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment is located on
the passenger’s side of the instrument panel above the
glove compartment. The beverage retainer inside the
Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Press and release the button on the door to open it. The
large door swings upward to allow easy access to the
compartment’s contents.
Beverage Cooler Operation
The blower speed setting on the climate control sets the
rate at which air flows into the compartment. The airflow
control valve inside the compartment determines how
much air flows into the compartment. Turning the valve
rearward increases the airflow, turning it forward decreases the airflow, and turning it all the way forward
turns off the airflow.
3
Airflow Control Valve
The compartment cools when the airflow control valve is
open, the engine is running, and the Air Conditioning
(A/C) is on or the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system (if equipped) is set for automatic operation. This
allows you to cool the compartment when the climate
control is in a cooling or heating mode.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Whether operating a Manual Heating and A/C
system or operating an ATC system in a manual mode,
the A/C indicator must be ON to cool the compartment.
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
Press and release the button on the door to open it. The
door swings upward to allow easy access to the compartment.
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Center Console Storage
3
Center Console Cubby Bin
Center Stack Cubby Bin
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
Center Console Storage Bin
NOTE: The sliding armrest (if so equipped) must be in
the rearward position in order to access the release button
on the front of the bin door.
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage
Bin
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the 20% seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the 20% seatback/
armrest.
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Armrest Cubby Bin
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second-Row Map Pocket and Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
on the back of the drivers seatback.
1 - Grocery Retainers
2 - Map Storage
In-Floor Storage Bin with Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9 l) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35 l)
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
the notches as shown.
3
In-Floor Storage Bin
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if
equipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to
release the latch and then forward to open the bin door.
Removable Liner
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging
station in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it,
press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and
release.
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in this section.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in this section.
Rechargeable Flashlight
• Cargo tie-downs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
seats.
Cargo Tie-Downs
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
3
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in this section.
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in this section.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in this section.
• Cargo tie-downs.
Cargo Tie-Downs
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
3
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Then, insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end
of the cover housing into the attachment point on the
opposite side of the vehicle.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
release the handle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in an accident. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
The Rear Window Wiper/Washer Control is located on the right side of the steering column.
The rotary ring switch on the lever controls rear wiper
and washer operation. Rotate the switch upward to the
first detent to activate the rear wiper. Rotate the switch
upward to the second detent to activate the rear washer.
The washer will continue to operate until you release the
switch. Once released, the wiper will cycle three times,
return to the park position, and then resume normal
operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper will automatically return to the
park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while it
is operating. The rear wiper will resume operation when
you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Control
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Turn the rear wiper OFF when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning OFF the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left ON and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned OFF
and the blade cannot return to the park position,
damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTE: Refer to the “Engine Compartment” diagram in
Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield washer and rear window washer share
the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
rearview mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For five more minutes of operation, press the
button again.
CAUTION!
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68
kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross
rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the total
load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total
load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack
does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To Move the Cross Rails
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approximately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.
Roof Luggage Rack
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stanchions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning.
There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail
and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail. Make
sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at
any position for proper function.
3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp
tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross
rail in the eighth position.
The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any luggage rack position for proper function.
Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof
rack, cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Electrical Disturbance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code REN — Multimedia System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 235
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 247
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 249
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD
Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 254
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 265
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 265
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
䡵 Sales Code REU — Multimedia System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 273
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 267
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 267
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Sirius Backseat TV™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) . . . . . 271
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . . 278
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 282
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e., CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ General Climate Control Functions —
All Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Single-Zone Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Two- And Three-Zone Manual Air Conditioning
And Heating Systems — If Equipped . . . . . . . 289
▫ Two- And Three-Zone Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Systems — If Equipped . . . . . . 293
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
— Side Window Demist Outlet
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Storage Compartment or Remote Display Panel*
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
HAZARD Switch
Switch Bank
Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment*
Glove Box
9 — Climate Control
10 — Radio
11 — Ignition Switch
* If Equipped
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the pointer rises
to the “H” mark, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If
the Air Conditioning A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If
the needle remains on the “H” mark, turn the engine OFF
immediately and call for service. (See page 394 for more
information.)
NOTE: The gauge pointer will remain near its last
reading when the engine is turned off. It will return to a
true reading when the engine is restarted.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running, as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator light if the engine overheats.
2. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position.
3. Fuel Cap Indicator
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel filler cap is located.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. (See page 394 for more information.)
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches
⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, the indicator light will
flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound,
until the engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
5. Front Fog Light Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light shows when the fog lights are ON. (See
page 148 for more information.)
6. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to
approximately one-eighth tank. (See page 372 for
more information.)
7. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the
corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when
the turn signal switch is operated. (See page 149 for more
information.)
NOTE: A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
8. High Beam Indicator Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the multifunction lever on the left side
of the steering column toward you to switch to low beam.
(See page 150 for more information.)
9. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the vehicle Security system is
arming and then flash slowly when the system
is armed. The light will also turn on for about
three seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
ON. (See page 18 for more information.)
11. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) system. The light will turn on for a bulb
check when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for as long as
three seconds.
When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD
system soon.
When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.
12. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
13. Transaxle Range Indicator
This display indicator shows automatic transaxle gear
selection. (See page 311 for more information.)
14. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for several seconds after the
ignition switch is turned ON as a reminder to
“buckle up.” This light will remain on as long as
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled. (See page 48 for
more information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify the mileage the
vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer
reading is changed because of repair or replacement, be
sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the
service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
(ESP in partial off mode), “NoFUSE” (IOD fuse out),
“HotOIL” (2.4L engine oil temp too hot), or “CHANgE
OIL” will display in the odometer.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then most warnings will display in the EVIC. (See page
221 for more information.)
Hot Oil — 2.4L Engine
Refer to “Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only”
under “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6.
Vehicle Warning Messages
Fuel Cap Fault Message
When the appropriate conditions exist, messages such as
“hood” (hood ajar), “door” (door ajar), “gATE” (liftgate
ajar), “LoCOOL” (low engine coolant), “LoWASH” (low
washer fluid), “gASCAP” (fuel cap fault), “ESPOFF”
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard. Then press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. (See page 421 for more
information.)
Change Oil Message (Base And Mid Line Clusters
Only)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
16. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light turns on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not turn on during starting.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
will turn on and remain on when the ignition
switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the
ON position. The light will turn off after the engine is
started.
If the light does not turn on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light turns on and remains on while driving, safely
bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine. DO
NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS
CORRECTED. This light does not show the quantity of
oil in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
using the proper procedure. (See page 424 for more
information.)
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
such as the fog lights or rear defroster. If the light remains
on, it means that the charging system is experiencing a
problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain
service immediately.
19. Cruise Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed
control system is turned on. (See page 159 for
more information.)
20. Trip Odometer Button
Changing the Display
Press and release this button once to change the display
from odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it again to
change the display from “Trip A” to “Trip B.”
Resetting the Trip Odometer
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approximately two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
21. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale light after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly. (See page 355 for more
information.)
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. (Refer to
“Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — General
Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)” in Section 5 for more information).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
22. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
brakes. Furthermore, the ABS light should be checked
frequently to assure that it is operating properly. If the
light does not turn on, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer. (See page 328 for more information.)
23. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions. (See
page 328 for more information.)
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
This light is part of an Onboard Diagnostic
system called OBD II. The OBD system monitors
emissions, engine, and automatic transaxle control systems. The MIL will turn on when the key is in the
ON position before engine start. If the MIL does not turn
on when turning the key from LOCK or ACC to ON, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. (See page
421 for more information.)
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
25. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light – If
Equipped
The yellow ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator
Light will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. The light should go
out with the engine running. The system will
turn the light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the
BAS or both. If this light remains on after the several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected. (See page 328
for more information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
26. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
ABS.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake System Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder
drops below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level. If so,
the vehicle should have service performed and the brake
fluid level checked.
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the Brake System Warning
Light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in
braking performance or vehicle stability during
braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the
event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS is
required in the event of an EBD failure.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to
the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application. (See page
326 for more information.)
27. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to six seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. (See page 63 for more information.)
28. Compass/Temperature Display Button (Mid Line
Clusters Only)
Operates the Compass/Temperature display in the
Vacuum Fluorescent Display.
29. Vacuum Fluorescent Display (Mid Line And
Premium Clusters Only)
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster, this
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
(See page 221 for more information.)
On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, this
display shows the compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
SE, and SW) and the outside temperature. The
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button operates
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
this display. Press and release the button once to turn on
the display. Press and release it again to turn off the
display.
Setting Compass Variance (Mid Line Cluster Only)
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. To allow the compass
module to compensate for that difference and ensure
accuracy, you can set the variance in the compass module
to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the
Compass Variance Map. To set the variance, perform the
following procedure.
NOTE:
• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the instrument panel, as this is where the compass
sensor is located.
• The shift lever must be in PARK to enter the variance
setting mode.
To set the variance, first, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position. Next, press and hold the COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button until the current
variance zone number displays (approximately 10
seconds). Then, press and release the button to increment the variance value by one, until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map. Finally,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position to exit
this mode.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The default variance setting is Zone 8. When
setting the variance, the numbering will wrap around
from Zone 15 to Zone 1.
Calibrating the Compass (Mid Line Cluster Only)
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate it. However, prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance
value is selected.
NOTE: The shift lever must be in PARK to enter the
Calibration mode.
To calibrate the compass, first, start the engine. Next,
press and hold the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button until the current variance zone number
displays (approximately 10 seconds). Then, press and
hold the button again until the direction displays with
the “CAL” indicator on continuously (approximately 10
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
seconds). Finally, drive the vehicle in one or more complete circles, at speeds under 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area
free from power lines and large metallic objects, until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
instrument cluster below the fuel and temperature
gauges. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted
buttons (described in this section) are also equipped with
the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the following:
4
EVIC
• Compass display,
• Outside temperature display,
• Trip computer functions,
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• System status, including vehicle information warning
message displays, and Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) displays (if equipped), and,
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features).
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
EVIC Steering Wheel Switches
Press and release this button and the mode
displayed will change between Compass/
Outside Temperature, Trip Functions, System
MENU Status, and Personal Settings.
Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Press this button to reset Trip Functions and
change Personal Settings.
RESET
Button
Press this button to scroll through Trip Functions (Average Fuel Economy, Distance To
Empty [DTE], Elapsed Time, Units In), System
SCROLL Status Messages, and Personal Settings (CusButton tomer Programmable Features).
Press this button to display
Compass/Outside Temperature.
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE Button
the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel # Transmit. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Channel # Training. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Channel # Trained. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Clearing Channels. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Channels Cleared. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Did Not Train. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
Section 2.
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in Section 5.
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in Section 5.
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in Section 5.
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in Section 5.
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in Section 5.
• Low Fuel
• Cal
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
• Coolant Low
• Key in Ignition
• Lights On
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET
button.
• Distance To Empty
• Elapsed Time
• Units In
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
• When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Units In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “U.S.” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).
Compass Display
Press and release this button to display
one of eight compass readings and the
outside temperature. The compass readCOMPASS/ ings indicate the direction the vehicle is
TEMPERA- facing.
TURE Button
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may calibrate the compass by slowly completing one
or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or is inaccurate, you can
calibrate the compass manually by performing the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “CALIBRATE COMPASS” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC.
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. To allow the compass
module to compensate for that difference and ensure
accuracy, you can set the variance in the compass module
to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the
Compass Variance Map. To set the variance, perform the
following steps.
NOTE:
• The default variance setting is Zone 8. When setting
the variance, the numbering will wrap around from
Zone 15 to Zone 1.
• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the instrument panel, as this is where the compass
sensor is located.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “COMPASS VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone number
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE
button to exit.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
“LANGUAGE”
When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the RESET button while in this display to select English,
French, or Spanish. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect威 language selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
“AUTO UNLK ON EXIT”
When ON is selected, all doors and the liftgate will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
“RKE UNLOCK”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger doors and liftgate.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all doors and the
liftgate will unlock on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
“SOUND HORN WITH LOCK”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be
selected with or without the flash lights with lock feature.
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“FLASH LAMP WITH LOCK”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
“HEADLAMP OFF DELAY”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
after turning the ignition to the LOCK position. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“HEADLAMPS WITH WIPERS” (Available with
Auto Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the multifunction lever is
placed in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ON. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“KEY-OFF POWER DELAY”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and ignition powered outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
“ILLUMIN APPROACH”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button until “Off,” “30
sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
“DISPLAY UNITS IN”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “U.S.” or “METRIC”
appears.
“NAV TURN BY TURN” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
COMPASS VARIANCE
Refer to “Compass Variance” under “Compass Display.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
CALIBRATE COMPASS
Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration” under “Compass Display.”
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
The radio will provide excellent reception under most
operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: AM (Amplitude Modulation), in which the transmitted sound causes
the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary; and
FM (Frequency Modulation), in which the frequency of
the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbance
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the radio and steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped) will remain active
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the radio and
steering wheel radio controls (if equipped) will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN Multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
player, USB port, a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and a
“JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy
menu selection.
A 30-gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos
from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System
(VES)™, separate audio outputs allow passengers to
listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks
play through the system’s wireless headphones. This
means rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the
optional rear seat entertainment system, while the driver
and front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
radio-specific user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your radio-specific user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For Hands Free Phone Communication (UConnect威)
“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
Setting the Clock
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RET Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Audio Language — If Equipped
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
MPEG
Specification
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
16-Digit Character
Display
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing
the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM or FM Button
Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
SALES CODE REU — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REU Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, six disc CD/
DVD player, USB port, 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD),
and the UConnect威 Hands-Free Bluetooth威 cellular system.
A 7 in (17.8 cm) remote screen allows easy menu selection, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
The satellite navigation capability combines a GlobalPositioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
a remote color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System
(VES)™, separate audio outputs allow passengers to
listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks
play through the system’s wireless headphones. This
means rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the
optional rear-seat entertainment system while the driver
and front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include music type selections,
traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets, parental
lockout for VES™ (if equipped), and a backup camera
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera.
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing the Time Zone
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three seconds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Time Zone,” and then press and release the joystick.
5. If the desired time zone setting has a check mark next
to it, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob
surrounding the joystick to select the desired time zone
setting, and then press and release the joystick. A check
mark will display next to the selection.
6. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When On is selected, this feature will display the time of
day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to
change the current setting:
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three seconds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Daylight Savings,” and then press and release the
joystick.
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three seconds.
5. If the desired setting has a check mark next to it,
proceed to the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob
surrounding the joystick to select “Off” or “On,” and
then press and release the joystick. A check mark will
display next to the selection.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
6. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. If “User Time” has a check mark next to it, proceed to
the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob surrounding the
joystick to scroll to “User Time,” and then press and
release the joystick.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the screen when the system is turned off. Proceed as
follows to change the current setting:
5. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Set
Hours,” and then press and release the joystick.
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three seconds.
6. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the hour
highlighted on the clock on the screen. Press and release
the joystick when done.
7. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Set
Minutes,” and then press and release the joystick.
8. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the
minutes highlighted on the clock on the screen. Press and
release the joystick when done.
9. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Clock if Radio off,” and then press and release the
joystick to change the current setting. A check mark will
display next to “Clock if Radio off” when the feature is
selected.
5. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™ — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat
TV™ offers three video channels for family entertainment,
directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ includes the following components for rear seat entertainment:
• A diagonal 8 in (20 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center overhead console.
The screen features brightness control for optimum
daytime and nighttime viewing.
• The LCD Screen swings down from the console to
allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
• Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passengers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
VES™ with Rear HVAC Controls
• The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
• A battery-powered infrared remote control that snaps
into a molded compartment in the center console.
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your “Video Entertainment System
(VES)™ User Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
• the iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES/REL and
REQ/RET radios only with UConnect威. For sales code
REN/REZ touch screen radio and REU/REX/RE1 radio,
refer to the separate User’s Manual.
Connecting The iPod姞 Device
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box or center console on some vehicles. This location may
vary with vehicle). Once the iPod威 is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle system (this may take a few
seconds to connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on
the iPod威 display, and it starts charging and is ready for
use by pressing radio switches as described below.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 mobile digital
device into the vehicle’s sound system through a connector (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable
(available through MOPAR威). See your authorized dealer
for details.
Using this feature,
• the iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) information display on radio.
• the iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPod威 contents.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPod威) mode, the iPod威 audio track (if
available from iPod威) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode the iPod威 will be in Play
mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
Tune/Scroll Knob
Use the Tune/Scroll knob to go to the next or previous
track.
The Tune/Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll
wheel on the iPod威 mobile digital device.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
take you back to the beginning of the current track.
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
seconds of the current track.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
current track.
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
seconds of the current track.
SEEK Buttons
Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous track in the list; if you press this button at any
other time in the current track it will go back to the
beginning of the track.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will take you to the
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all
of the screens, the last press of the INFO button will take
you back to the Play mode screen on the radio.
REPEAT Button
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing
track.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
tracks.
RND (Random) Button (RES/REL Radios Only)
Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
on and shuffle off modes of the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on.
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威
device.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Tune/Scroll Knob
In the List mode, the Tune/Scroll knob functions in a
similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 device.
Turning the Tune/Scroll knob clockwise (forward) and
counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the Tune/Scroll knob to select and start
playing the track. By turning the Tune/Scroll knob fast,
you can jump through the list faster. During fast scroll,
you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display.
• 1 – Playlists
During all List modes, the iPod威 will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the Tune/Scroll
knob backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track
faster.
• 2 – Artists
• 3 – Albums
• 4 – Genres
• 5 - Audiobooks
• 6 – Podcasts
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button
Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu
of the iPod威. This takes you to the same top level menu
as on your iPod威. Turn the Tune/Scroll knob to list the
top menu item you wish to select and then press the
Tune/Scroll knob. This will take you to the next sub
menu list item of the iPod威 and you can follow the same
steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPod威.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left- and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
Remote Sound Controls
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth.
5. Store a disc in its case after playing.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
7. Do not store a disc where temperatures may become
too high.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If a disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching a disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
6. Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight.
8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
irregular shapes.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. For information about basic climate control functions, refer to
“General Climate Control Functions — All Systems.” For
more detailed information about the climate controls in
your vehicle, refer to “Single-Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System,” “Two- and Three-Zone
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Systems,” or
“Two- and Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) Systems.”
General Climate Control Functions — All Systems
Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the cabin.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Control
Use this control to engage and disengage the A/C.
NOTE:
• The A/C compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for about 10 seconds.
• If A/C performance seems lower than expected, check
the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the
radiator) for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean
with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator
and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air
conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Use these controls to choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. For vehicles equipped with a three-zone system, air is also directed through the outlets in the
headliner, unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON and in Floor mode.
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
NOTE: These outlets are adjustable to direct airflow. For
maximum airflow to the rear, aim the center instrument
panel outlets so that they are directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets. For vehicles equipped with a
three-zone system, air is directed through the floor outlet
in the right quarter trim panel, unless the climate control
for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
For vehicles equipped with a three-zone system, air
is also directed through the outlets in the headliner,
unless the climate control for the rear passengers is ON
and in Floor mode.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. For vehicles equipped with
a three-zone system, air is directed through the floor
outlet in the right quarter trim panel, unless the climate
control for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
NOTE: This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. For vehicles equipped
with a three-zone system, air is directed through the floor
outlet in the right quarter trim panel, unless the climate
control for the rear passengers is ON and in Panel mode.
NOTE: Use this mode with maximum blower and
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
• Recirculation Control
Use this button to block the flow of outside air
from coming into the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
• Only use the Recirculation mode as a temporary
means to block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust,
and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in
very hot or humid weather.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Single-Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating
System
2. Temperature Control
Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature
settings.
3. Mode Control
Turn to select either a primary mode as identified by the
symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more
air distribution you receive from that mode. See Note 1
and 2
4. Electric Rear Window Defroster Control
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Section 3 for more
information.
Single-Zone Manual Climate Control
1. Blower Control
The blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are four
blower speeds.
5. A/C Control
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON. See Note 3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
6. Recirculation Mode Control
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
Note 1 - The A/C compressor operates in Mix and
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the A/C
control is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
Note 2 - The A/C will engage automatically to prevent
fogging when the Recirculation button is pressed and the
Mode control is set to Panel or Panel/Floor. The A/C can
be deselected manually without disturbing the Mode
control selection.
Note 3 - For maximum cooling, use A/C and recirculation
at the same time. If economy mode is desired, turn OFF
the A/C and turn the Temperature control to the desired
temperature setting.
Two- and Three-Zone Manual Air Conditioning
and Heating Systems — If Equipped
4
Two-Zone Manual Climate Control
1. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Panel Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when selected.
3. Bi-Level Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when selected.
4. Front Blower Control
The blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are four
blower speeds.
5. Floor Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when selected.
6. Mix Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when selected.
7. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
8. Electric Rear Window Defroster Button
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Section 3 for more
information.
9. Recirculation Mode Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
10. Defrost Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
11. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
1. RR Control
Turns the climate control in the overhead console above
the second row passenger seats ON and OFF. Press and
release to change the current setting.
2. Rear Blower Control
The blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are three
blower speeds.
3. Rear Temperature Control
Provides independent temperature control for the rear
cabin. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin.
Rear-Zone Manual Climate Control
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Rear Blower Control
The blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are three
blower speeds.
2. Rear Temperature Control
Provides rear seat occupants with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings in the rear cabin.
Rear-Zone Manual Climate Control
The Rear-Zone Manual Climate Control for the rear
passengers is located in the overhead console above the
second row passenger seats.
3. Lockout
This indicator illuminates when the climate control is
turned OFF by the RR control on the Rear-Zone Manual
Climate Control in the instrument panel.
4. Rear Mode Control
Turn to select Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor for the mode of
rear cabin air distribution.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Two- and Three-Zone Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Systems — If Equipped
2. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
3. Display Screen
Shows the current blower speed, mode, and temperature
settings, and it will display an indicator when Recirculation mode is ON and when the A/C is ON.
4. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
Two-Zone ATC
1. ATC ON/OFF Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
5. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
6. Recirculation Mode Button
Press and release to change the current setting. See Note 1
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Mode Button
Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of air
distribution to Floor, Panel, Bi-Level, or Mix.
8. Electric Rear Window Defroster Button
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Section 3 for more
information.
Note 1 - To prevent window fogging, Recirculation Mode
will not operate when either Defrost or Mix mode is
selected. Doing so will cause the indicator to blink and
then turn OFF.
9. Defrost Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when ON.
10. Front Blower Button
Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to
increase blower speed.
11. AUTO Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation — Twoand Three-Zone ATC” for more information.
1. ATC ON/OFF Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
2. Left Front Temperature Control
Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings.
3. Display Screen
Shows the current blower speed, mode, and temperature
settings, and it will display an indicator when the A/C is
ON.
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation — Twoand Three-Zone ATC” for more information.
7. Mode Button
Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of air
distribution to Floor, Panel, Bi-Level, or Mix.
8. Recirculation Mode Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON. See Note 1
4. Right Front Temperature Control
Provides right front seat occupant with independent
temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for
warmer temperature settings.
9. Defrost Mode Button
Press and release to select. The indicator illuminates
when ON.
5. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting.
10. Front Blower Control
Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to
increase front blower speed.
6. AUTO Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
11. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for all
three zones from the Left Front Temperature Control.
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Note 1 - To prevent window fogging, Recirculation Mode
will not operate when either Defrost or Mix mode is
selected. Doing so will cause the indicator to blink and
then turn OFF.
1. Rear Blower Control
Press the DOWN arrow to decrease or the UP arrow to
increase rear blower speed.
2. Rear Temperature Control
Provides independent temperature control for the rear
cabin. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin.
3. Rear Mode Button
Press the DOWN or UP arrow to change the mode of rear
cabin air distribution to Floor, Panel, or Bi-Level.
Three-Zone ATC Lower Control Panel
4. REAR Button
Turns the climate control in the overhead console above
the second row passenger seats ON and OFF. Press and
release the button to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
5. Electric Rear Window Defroster Button
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Section 3 for more
information.
1. AUTO
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, and volume
automatically. Turn to this position to select. Refer to
“Automatic Operation — Rear-Zone ATC” for more
information.
2. Rear Blower Control
The blower speed increases as you move the control to
the right from the “O” (Off) position. There are 10 blower
speeds.
Rear-Zone ATC
The Rear-Zone ATC for the rear passengers is in the
overhead console above the second row passenger seats.
3. Rear Temperature Control
Provides rear seat occupants with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer
temperature settings in the rear cabin. When the rear
climate control is turned OFF by the rear button on the
Three – Zone ATC, a red indicator will appear at the
bottom of the Rear Temperature Control Knob.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Rear Mode Control
Turn to select Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor for the mode of
rear cabin air distribution.
• Other sensors take into account vehicle-speed, A/C
pressure, outside temperature, and engine cooling
temperature.
Automatic Operation — Two- and Three-Zone ATC
The Two- and Three-Zone ATC systems automatically
maintain the climate in the cabin of the vehicle. To
accomplish this, the system gathers information from the
climate controls, from a dual sun-sensor located in the
top of the instrument panel, from an infrared sensor
located between the sun visors, and from various sensors
located throughout the vehicle.
Using all of these inputs, the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, airflow distribution, airflow
volume, and the amount of outside air recirculation. This
maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions.
• The climate controls provide the system with operator
input.
1. Press and release the AUTO button and the ATC
displays the word “AUTO,” along with current settings
for temperature, mode, and blower speed. It also displays
the snowflake icon if the A/C is running.
• The dual sun-sensor monitors sun load coming
through the windshield.
• The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passengers.
To select automatic operation, perform the following
steps:
2. Turn the Left Front Temperature Control, the Right
Front, and if so equipped, the Rear Temperature Control
to dial in the temperature that you want the system to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
maintain for each zone. On Three-Zone ATC systems, if
so desired, push and release the SYNC button. Then turn
the Left Front Temperature Control to dial in the temperature that you want the system to maintain for all
three zones.
Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system.
Should the desired comfort level require A/C, the system
will automatically make the adjustment. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically. 72°F (22°C) is the
recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
• Pressing the A/C button, or adjusting the blower
speed, or changing the mode of air distribution while
in AUTO mode will cancel automatic operation.
Automatic Operation — Rear-Zone ATC
1. Press the REAR button on the Three-Zone ATC in the
instrument panel to turn ON the Rear-Zone ATC in the
overhead console.
2. Turn the Rear Blower control on the Rear-Zone ATC in
the overhead console to the AUTO position.
3. Turn the Rear Temperature control on the Rear-Zone
ATC in the overhead console to dial in the temperature
that you want the system to maintain in the rear cabin.
NOTE:
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. Refer to “Cooling System”
under “Maintenance Procedures” and to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Section 7 for information
pertaining to the cooling system and coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 for A/C Air Filter service information or see
your authorized dealer for service. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for filter service intervals.
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 311
䡵 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ 4-Speed Or 6-Speed (AutoStick威) Automatic
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ AutoStick威 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 319
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 341
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Flexible Fuel— 2.7L Engines Only
(Except California Emission States) . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 366
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ 2.4L And 2.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 375
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 392
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels
On The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
• Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in
your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the shift lever. Accidents can also be caused
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause serious
or fatal injuries.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transaxle
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Normal Starting (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them
carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in
and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the vehicle into
PARK, remove the key from the ignition, and apply the
parking brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children
inside a vehicle.
Brake/Transaxle Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transaxle Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON
position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
BTSI Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To activate
the override system, perform the following steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and
rotate it to the ON position.
3. Remove the cubby bin liner located in the center
console behind the shift lever.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
4. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole
at the front of the cubby bin and push the manual
override release lever forward.
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
5. While holding the release lever forward, move the
shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.
6. Release the manual override.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the brake
pedal is applied.
4-Speed or 6-Speed (AutoStick姞) Automatic
Transaxle
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
5
Shift Lever
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transaxle. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. Apply
parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an Automatic Transaxle
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE
Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this range.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE — 6-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
mode and select the “5” range when frequent transaxle
shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds or while towing heavy trailers). Under these
conditions, using the “5” range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up.
“D” (Overdrive) — 4-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
“D” (Overdrive) range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing
heavy trailers). Under these conditions, using the “3”
range will improve performance and extend transaxle life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
“3” (Drive) — 4-Speed Transaxle
This range eliminates shifts into “D” (Overdrive). The
transaxle will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while
in this range. The “3” (Drive) range should also be used
when descending steep grades to prevent brake system
distress.
NOTE: Using the “3” (Drive) range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
“L” (Low) — 4-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
“D” (Overdrive) and “5” range (for 6-speed
AutoStick威 transaxle) and “3” range (for 4-speed auto
transaxle) by changing shift points. This is done to
prevent transaxle damage due to overheating.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into 2nd gear
(3rd gear for 6-speed). The transaxle remains in 2nd gear
(3rd gear for 6-speed) despite the forward gear selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transaxle.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transaxle can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers six
manual ratio changes to provide you with more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick姞 Operation
By placing the shift lever one shift-level below the DRIVE
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the shift lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift
and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will
display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range
indicator.
AutoStick姞 General Information
NOTE: In Autostick威 mode, the transaxle will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the
Right (+) or Left (-).
• Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snow or icy
conditions.
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the shift lever is moved
out of the AutoStick (+/-) position.
• You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear. The system will
ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
• If a ratio other than 1st is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is engaged.
• The transaxle will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
• Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however:
− If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
− If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ACCELERATION
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Never use PARK position on an automatic transaxle
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
Parking Brake
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
The Brake System Warning Light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking
brake is applied and the ignition switch is on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the Brake System Warning Light will
turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master
cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
wouldn’t have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the Brake System Warning
Light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in
braking performance or vehicle stability during
braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop
the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to
control. You could have an accident. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Electronic Brake Control System” in this section for more
information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment
that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities
of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP Operating Modes
The ESP system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The ESP OFF button is located in the switch bank above
the climate Control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP/
TCS Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESP on
again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the
ESP/TCS Indicator Light will turn off. This will restore
the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP OFF Button
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily
depressing the ESP OFF button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both
turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. They should both turn off with the engine
running. If the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light
turns on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS
system, or both. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
NOTE:
• ⬙The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in this section for more information before towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will flash,
the engine power will be reduced, and you will feel the
brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying.
WARNING!
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
TIRE MARKINGS
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which
the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
TIRE LOADING AND TIRE PRESSURE
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295
kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
1. Safety—
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
5
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. DO NOT make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
• Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, DO NOT drive more than 50
mph (80 km/h).
• Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, DO NOT
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, DO NOT drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, DO
NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48
km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. DO NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
DO NOT use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
CAUTION!
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
CAUTION!
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information on
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
• The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
• The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off once the system re-
ceivesthe updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193
kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
Telltale light will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition,
the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing
pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FLEXIBLE FUEL— 2.7L ENGINES ONLY (EXCEPT
CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES)
E-85 GENERAL INFORMATION
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. This section only covers those subjects that
are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other
sections of this manual for information on features that
are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only
powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the special E-85 fuel filler cap can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Along with the special E-85 fuel filler cap, your vehicle
may display a badge, which also indicates it can operate
on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
E-85 Badge
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
Engine Block Heater (if equipped)
Block heater usage is beneficial for E-85 startability when
the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
SELECTION OF ENGINE OIL FOR FLEXIBLE
FUEL VEHICLES (E-85) AND GASOLINE
VEHICLES
FFV vehicles operated on E–85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in Mopar威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the manufacturer’s engines. Use Mopar威 or an equivalent
oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel you may
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
NOTE: Your engine oil filler cap also describes the
correct engine oil to use.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
STARTING
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
CRUISING RANGE
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your fuel economy and driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L and 2.7L Engines
2.4L and 2.7L Engines are designed to meet
all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87.
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high-quality
unleaded regular gasolines, and in some circumstances
may result in poorer performance.
3.5L Engine
The 3.5L Engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over
high-quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer
performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with a 2.4L or 3.5L engine, DO
NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and
driveability problems and may damage critical fuel
system components.
NOTE: The 2.7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol
use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES). Only
vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on
E-85. For more information, refer to “Flexible Fuel” in
this section.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBD II” in Section 7.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
EXAMPLE ONLY
Empty Weight
Load (including driver,
passengers, and cargo)
Total
GAWR
Front Axle
2054 lbs
(932 kg)
271 lbs
(123 kg)
2325 lbs
(1055 kg)
2546 lbs
(1155 kg)
Rear Axle
1805 lbs
(819 kg)
579 lbs
(263 kg)
2384 lbs
(1081 kg)
2708 lbs
(1228 kg)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total
allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver,
passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver.)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum
capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load
over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you
do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be
less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Frontal Area
Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width
of the front of a trailer.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
Refer to “TSC (Trailer Sway Control)” under “Electronic
Brake Control System” in this section for information on
this system.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle dealer for additional information.
Weight Distributing Hitch System
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transaxle
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
2.4L Automatic 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
7,300 lbs (3,311 kg)
2.7L/3.5L (with
out Trailer Tow 7,300 lbs (3,311 kg)
Prep Package
(AHT)
7,300 lbs (3,311 kg)
2.7L (with
Trailer Tow
Prep Package
(AHT)
8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg) which includes
up to 5 persons & Luggage
2,000 lbs (907 kg) which includes
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
1 to 2 persons & Luggage
1,500 lbs (680 kg) which includes
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
3 to 4 persons & Luggage
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg) which includes
5 to 7 persons & Luggage
3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) which in40 sq ft (3.7 sq m) cludes up to 5 persons & Luggage
1,000 lbs (454 kg) which includes
40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
6 to 7 persons & Luggage
Max. Tongue
Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
*Except for
AWD models.
300 lbs (136 kg)
100 lbs (91 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Engine/
Transaxle
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
3.5L (with
Trailer Tow
Prep Package
(AHT)
8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) which includes 1 to 2 persons & Luggage
3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) which in40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
cludes 3 to 4 persons & Luggage
40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
Max. Tongue
Wt.
350 lbs (159 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
*Except for
AWD models.
100 lbs (113 kg)
2,500 lbs (1,134 kg) which in8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
*Except for
cludes 7 persons & Luggage
AWD models.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
NOTE: * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7 persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be attempted.
8,300 lbs (3,765 kg)
40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
2,500 lbs (1,134 kg) which includes 5 to 6 persons & Luggage
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
• During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transaxle, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4- and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
4-Pin Connector
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Automatic Transaxle
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
the “3” range for 4-speed automatic or the “5” range for
6-speed automatic.
NOTE: Using the “3” or “5” range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
7-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing” in the Maintenance Schedule.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
NOTE: Check the 4-speed automatic transaxle fluid
level before towing. The 6-speed transaxle is sealed and
the fluid level cannot be checked. See your authorized
dealer for assistance.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped)
− By using the Autostick威 modes and selecting a specific
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
highest gear range should be selected that allows for
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating,
take the following actions:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods, put transaxle in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On
The Ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Gas And 2.0L
Diesel Engines Only (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . 395
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition
And All Four Wheels On The Ground) . . . . . . 412
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
6
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The HAZARD switch is located in the instrument panel
switch bank above the climate controls.
Push and release the switch to turn on the hazard
warning flashers. When the hazard warning is
activated, all directional turn signals will flash on
and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
and release the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the hazard warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your Air Conditioning A/C system is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds
heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the
A/C system removes this heat. You can also turn the
Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control
to floor, and the Blower control to High. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself,
refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Gas and 2.0L
Diesel Engines Only (If Equipped)
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: Although the maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h), you may of course reduce
vehicle speed further as needed.
6
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could
be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires
only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
• A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always
stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
Jack Storage Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
6. Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite
the jacking position. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Set the parking brake and place the shift lever in
PARK.
3. Turn OFF the ignition.
4. Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.
5. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On Seven-Passenger Models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2, and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
6
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jackhandle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is
on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to
pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel.
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: On Seven-Passenger Models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2, and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
6
Spare Tire Retainer
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jackhandle assembly counterclockwise until there is enough
cable slack to allow you to pull the cable and retainer out
from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch.
3. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground and
the valve stem is at the top of the wheel and facing away
from the rear of the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
5. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise
the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely
in place.
Jacking Instructions
6
Jack Warning Label
Spare Tire Retainer
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of
the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transaxle
in PARK; a manual transaxle in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting
this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of
motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely stowed,
spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
• Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
6
Jack Engagement Locations
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, the wheel cover is
held on the wheel by the wheel nuts. When reinstalling
the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the
valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, and
then install the wheel nuts.
6. Install the spare tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in Section 5 for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury or death.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the wheel nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
wheel nuts until each nut has been tightened twice.
Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
6
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location.
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced as soon
as possible.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the
jack-handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tightened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
Wheel Nuts
Tighten all wheel nuts occasionally to eliminate the
possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes
in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially
important during the first few hundred miles (kilometers) of operation and after changing a tire. This allows
the wheel nuts to seat properly. All wheel nuts should
first be firmly seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the wheel nuts to the final torque in increments.
Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite of the one you previously tightened until the final
torque is achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130
N·m).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
The battery is stored in a compartment that is located
behind the left front fender and is accessible through the
wheel well. Remote jump-start terminals are located in
the engine compartment.
6
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch. Set parking brake, place
automatic transaxle in PARK, and turn ignition to LOCK
for both vehicles.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote jumpstart positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment.
Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
9. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jumpstart positive battery post.
WARNING!
1 — Positive Terminal
2 — Negative Terminal
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump-start.
6
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7
for information on accessing the battery for service or
replacement.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and 1st gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control, turn the system OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Partial Off Mode”
under “Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in
Section 5.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle and
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds.
6
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flat bed towing
is the preferred towing method. However, if a flat bed
towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used. Furthermore, rear towing is not
recommended with the front wheels on the ground, as
transaxle damage can result. If rear towing is the only
alternative, a front end dolly must be used. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Your vehicle must be transported on a flat bed truck.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four
Wheels On The Ground)
CAUTION!
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC position.
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transaxle may result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains
in NEUTRAL.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance
to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi (25 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle
failure. If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is
to be towed more than 15 mi (25 km), the vehicle must be
transported either with a flat bed truck or with the front
wheels off the ground.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance
to be traveled must not exceed 15 mi (25 km), the towing
speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h), and both front
and rear wheels must be on the ground. Exceeding these
towing limits may cause a transaxle failure. If the transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more
than 15 mi (25 km), the vehicle must be transported on a
flat bed truck.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
used. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
6
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
CAUTION!
The manufacturer does not recommend towing an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) on a tow dolly. Vehicle
damage may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.4L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
䡵 2.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
䡵 3.5L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 428
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Authorized Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Windshield Washers/Rear Window Washer . . . 438
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
䡵 Fuses (Totally Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . 457
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 445
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Front Turn Signal/Park Light, Side
Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Tail/Stop Light, Rear Turn Signal Light,
Tail Light, Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
▫ License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 474
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
— Coolant Bottle
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Automatic Transaxle Dipstick
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
8 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
9 — Remote Jump-Start Negative Post
10 — Fuses (Totally Integrated Power Module [TIPM])
11 — Air Cleaner Filter
12 — Washer Fluid Bottle
13 — Engine Coolant Cap
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Coolant Bottle
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Power Steering Fluid
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Automatic Transaxle Dispstick
7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
8 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
9 — Remote Jump-Start Negative Post
10 — Fuses (Totally Integrated Power Module [TIPM])
11 — Air Cleaner Filter
12 — Washer Fluid Bottle
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Coolant Bottle
Coolant Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
8 — Remote Jump-Start Negative Post
9 — Fuses (Totally Integrated Power Module [TIPM])
10 — Air Cleaner Filter
11 — Washer Fluid Bottle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1.0
qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
Engine Oil Dipstick
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L
Engines for all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected periodically and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and
failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery
failure.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or
frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage
that could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to
make sure there is no interference between the belts and
other engine components. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule in Section 8 for specified service intervals. See
your authorized dealer for service.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emissions control. New plugs should be
installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in
your vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine
air cleaner filter service intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.,) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.,) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.,) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emissions control device.
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
WARNING!
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine OFF,
and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connectors disconnected for prolonged periods.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble do
not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
7
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage
as battery damage can result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for A/C
air filter service intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward
until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument
panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
Glove Box Removal
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
7
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install
the filter properly will result in the need to replace it
more often.
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the door
latch will not align properly.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. No chemical flushes should be used in any
power steering system; only the approved lubricant may
be used.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when
other maintenance is performed. A damaged seal and the
corresponding potentially damaged ball joint must be
replaced.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage and damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, liftgate hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade replacements fit multiple vehicles.
Windshield Washers/Rear Window Washer
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate “Engine Compartment”
diagram in Section 7 for the location of the washer fluid
reservoir.
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
instrument cluster.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
7
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Section
8.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct coolant type.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propylene
glycol-based coolants is not recommended.
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to five years or 100,000 mi (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
Four Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a
quick visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to
normal operating temperature, the level of the coolant in
the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL”
lines, shown on the bottle.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Six Cylinder Engines — the level of the coolant in the
pressurized coolant bottle should be between the
“COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle when the
engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month. When additional coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and fittings have unique material characteristics
that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses and fittings, or their equivalent in material and
specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or fittings that have
been removed during service. Care should be taken with
installing fittings to ensure they are properly installed
and fully connected. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake and Power Steering Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE:
• Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore,
oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily
an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid
when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place, resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system
failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transaxle fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Automatic Transaxle
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60
seconds.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the lever in PARK.
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 3.5L Engine
The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which is
the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 mi (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
• Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Fluid and Filter Changes
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this
manual.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type. It is important that the
transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level
using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transaxle; only the approved
lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and cargo area be kept
clear and open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar威 Total Clean, then
Mopar威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall威. Use Mopar威 Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
WARNING!
• For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials威 products.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with an electric defroster. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
FUSES (TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER
MODULE)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly.
This center contains fuses and relays.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
7
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power module cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the TIPM, and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
White
25 Amp
White
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Power Folding Seat
Transfer Case Module
- if equipped
Rear Door Module
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Cavity
J7
J8
J9
J10
J11
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
Power Memory Seat if equipped
Flex Fuel/PZEV Motor - if equipped
(If Equipped) Headlamp Washer Relay(BUX), Manual Tuning Valve
(If Equipped) Sway
Bar/Thatchum Security (BUX)/Power
Sliding Door
Cavity
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
MiniFuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Main
Electric Back Light
(EBL)
Rear Blower - if
equipped
Starter Solenoid
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module)/
Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
Front Windshield
Wiper Hi/Low
Front/Rear Washer
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J22
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
White
—
—
—
—
—
M6
—
MiniFuse
—
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Sunroof Module - if
equipped
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)
(If Equipped) Trailer
Lights
Front/Rear Axle
(If Equipped) Trailer
Tow
Power Inverter - if
equipped
Power Outlet #1/
Accessory (ACC) Rain
Sensor
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
M7
—
M8
M9
—
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Power Outlet #2 (Battery or Accessory
(ACC) Selectable)
Front Heated Seats if equipped
(If Equipped) Rear
Heated Seats
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
M10
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
—
M11
—
10 Amp
Red
Description
Vanity Lamps/
Hands-Free Module
(HFM) - if equipped,
Remote Display - if
equipped, Satellite
Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS) - if
equipped, Universal
Garage Door Opener
(UGDO) - if
equipped, Vanity
Light, Video Entertainment System
(VES)™ - if equipped
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) if equipped, Underhood Light
Cavity
M12
Cartridge
Fuse
—
M13
—
M14
—
M15
—
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Radio, Amplifier
(AMP)
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN), Multifunction Switch/Siren
Module
(If Equipped) Trailer
Tow (BUX)
Auto Dim Rearview
Mirror - if equipped,
Infrared Sensor (IR) if equipped, Multifunction Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) - if
equipped, Transfer
Case Module - if
equipped,
7
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
M16
—
M17
—
15 Amp
Blue
—
15 Amp
Blue
M18
M19
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
—
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)/
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Left Park/Side
Marker/Running/Tail
Lights, License Lights
Right Park/Side
Marker/Running/Tail
Lights
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #1 and #2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
M20
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
—
M21
M22
M23
M24
—
—
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) - if equipped,
Interior Lighting,
Steering Wheel
Switches - if
equipped, Switch
Bank
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #3
Right Horn
Left Horn
Rear Wiper
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
Cavity
M25
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
10 Amp
Red
—
M26
M27
M28
—
M29
—
M30
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Fuel Pump/Diesel
Lift Pump
Power MIRRORS
Switch/Drivers Window Switch
Steering Column
Lock, Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module)/
Transmission Feed
(Batt)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Rear Wiper Module
Module/Power Folding Mirror
Cavity
M31
M32
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
M33
—
M34
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
M35
M36
—
—
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Back-Up Lights
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module) Battery Feed
Power Assist Module,
HVAC Module, Headlamp Washers, Compass Module - if
equipped, Flashlight if equipped
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
Power Outlet #3
(Batt)
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
M37
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
—
M38
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
—
—
—
—
—
—
25 Amp
Natural
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP), STOP LIGHT
Switch
Lock/Unlock Motors
Ignition Run/
Accessory Relay
Ignition Run Relay
Starter Solenoid Relay
Ignition Run/Start
Relay
(NGC) Powertrain
Control Module Relay
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Electric Back Light
(EBL) Relay
—
—
Rear Blower Relay
ASD Relay (Feed for
M19 and M21)
Radiator Fan Relay
Low Speed
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
• Remove the IOD (Ignition Off-Draw) mini-fuses from
the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the
engine compartment.
• Or, disconnect the batter negative cable.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lights (Incandescent) . . . . . . . . 578
Courtesy/Reading Lights
(Optional LED) . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
Lighting . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Side Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145//H10
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Front
Turn Signal/Park Light, Side Marker Light
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain the lights in the
left headlight housing.
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1⁄4
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the
headlight housing.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Front Turn Signal/Park Light Bulb
Side Marker Light Bulb
Low Beam Headlight Bulb
High Beam Headlight Bulb
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
CAUTION!
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog light housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlight housing and rotate it 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Front Fog Light
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog light or to the left if replacing the right
front fog light to allow for easier access to the front of the
wheel well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
7
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
light housing and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise
to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Tail/Stop Light, Rear Turn Signal Light, Tail Light,
Backup Light
The taillights are a two-piece design. The tail/stop lights
and rear turn signal lights are located in the rear corner
body panels. The tail and backup lights are located in the
liftgate.
Changing the Tail/Stop Light or Rear Turn Signal
Light
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
taillight housing.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
taillight housing with one hand and grasp the flange on
the inboard side of the taillight housing with the other
hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to
disengage the taillight housing from the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector 1⁄4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillight
housing.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillight housing and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillight housing and fasteners.
Changing the Tail Light or Backup Light
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillight housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the taillight housing and the liftgate. Use the
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
taillight housing from the liftgate.
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
2 — Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector 1⁄4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Reinstall the taillight housing and fasteners.
License Plate Light
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that
position.
1 — Tail Light Bulb
2 — Backup Light Bulb
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
License Light
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in
the housing.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
7
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Component
Fuel (approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models with 2.4 Liter PZEV Engine
FWD Models without 2.4 Liter PZEV Engine
All-Wheel Drive Models
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
2.4 Liter Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
U.S.
Metric
18.5 gal
20.5 gal
21.1 gal
70 l
77.6 l
79.8 l
4.5 qts
5.5 qts
5.5 qts
4.26 l
5.2 l
5.2 l
7.9 qts
7.5 l
9.8 qts
9.3 l
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
Component
2.7 Liter Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
2.7 Liter Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
3.5 Liter Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
3.5 Liter Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
9.8 qts
Metric
9.3 l
12 qts
11.4 l
9.8 qts
9.3 l
12 qts
11.4 l
7
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (2.4L)
Engine Oil (2.7L)
Engine Oil (3.5L)
Oil Filter (2.4L)
Oil Filter (2.7L)
Oil Filter (3.5L)
Spark Plugs (2.4L)
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar威 04884900AB or equivalent
Mopar威 04884899AB or equivalent
Mopar威 04884899AB or equivalent
ZFR5F-11 (Gap.044 in [1.12 mm])
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Component
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Spark Plugs (2.7L)
TE10MCC5 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (3.5L)
ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection (2.4L)
87 Octane
Fuel Selection (2.7L)
87 Octane
Fuel Selection (2.7L - EXCEPT CALIE-85 Ethanol
FORNIA EMISSION STATES)
Fuel Selection (3.5L)
87 to 89 Octane
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transaxle
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent
Mopar威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 478
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 481
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Control System. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805
km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 mi (10,000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change
Required” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Section
4.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop for Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transaxle, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions,
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Miles
6,000
6,000
Kilometers
10 000
10 000
or Months
6
6
12,000
20 000
12
12,000
12,000
20 000
20 000
12
12
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
30,000
50 000
30
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
T
E
N Maintenance Items
A
N Replace the spark plugs on 2.4L and 2.7L engines.
C Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the spark plugs on 3.5L engines.
Replace the timing belt on 3.5L engines.
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter.
Replace the accessory drive belt on 2.4L and 2.7L engines.
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Miles
30,000
60,000
60,000
Kilometers
50 000
100 000
100 000
or Months
30
60
60
60,000
100 000
60
90,000
102,000
102,000
102,000
120,000
150
170
170
170
200
000
000
000
000
000
90
60
102
102
120
120,000
200 000
120
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 M
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 490
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 MOPAR威Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . 488
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
9
486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform
Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
9
488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
9
490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
496 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,326
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . 215,327,328
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 442
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Adding Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,194,438
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 429
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,289
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,289
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,434
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 288,289,293,433
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,346
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,60
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,63,80,218
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,58
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,58
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,208
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 441,442,472
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,328
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,328,329
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
INDEX 497
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 210,225
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 293
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,449
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,476
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,313
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 174
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,431
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,80
Beverage Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Booster Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
10
498 INDEX
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Brake Assist Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,446
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,328
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447,476
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,446
Brake/Transaxle Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 77
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465,466
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,465
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,228
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,419,420,427
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,372
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,188
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
INDEX 499
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,375
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 284
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,266,267
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Child Booster Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67,69,73,75
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,73
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,240,255,267
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,228
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,229
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 278
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10
500 INDEX
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 442
Cooler, Beverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,443
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 441,472,474
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,457
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,286,287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
INDEX 501
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 276
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 174
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 159
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 216,332
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 211
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 221
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 422,478
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,418,419,420
10
502 INDEX
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,474
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79,372
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,472,474
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,225,426
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,419,420,427
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,472
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 61
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79,372,439
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,439
Express Down Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Exterior Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,466
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,455
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
INDEX 503
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,434
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,474
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,149,207
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Flexible Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,367
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447,476
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,476
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,148,207,467
Folding Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,134
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
10
504 INDEX
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,474
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,421
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,120,318,363
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,378
INDEX 505
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,377
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威) . . . . . . . . . 93,266,267
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 150
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,156
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,289
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 150
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 163
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445,446
Ignition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
10
506 INDEX
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Indicator, Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,205
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,151
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,401
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
16
15
15
20
12
50
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 71,73
INDEX 507
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,465
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,146,466
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,63,80,218
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,334
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,150
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,332,334
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 211
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,207,467
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,466
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,156
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,207,466
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
10
508 INDEX
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,205
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,152
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,207
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 215
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,466
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466,468
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465,466
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 215
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 213,355
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,332,334
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,146,149,207,466,468
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 205
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,376
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,73
INDEX 509
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 215,422
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,163
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,491
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10
510 INDEX
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368,474
Odometer
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,218
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,225
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,225
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,474
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,225,426
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428,474
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,472
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,472
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,315
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,394,395
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 492
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 139
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INDEX 511
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,266,267
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect威) . . . . . . . . 93,266,267
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 341
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 174
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,476
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 442
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,267,284
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,266,267,271,276
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
10
512 INDEX
Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,141
Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,141
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 282
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 210,225
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
INDEX 513
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,79
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,266,267,271,276
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,41,80
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 46
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66,69,75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,42
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Child Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,129
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,141
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,141
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,134,141
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10
514 INDEX
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,208
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 441,474
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,240,255,267
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,58
Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 301
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,149,207,468
Sirius Backseat TV™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350,397
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,474
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,474
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,307
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
INDEX 515
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Steering
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,436
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,464
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 50
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,379
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 293
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
10
516 INDEX
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 341
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,345,493
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,342
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,345
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
INDEX 517
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 392
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215,331
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Transaxle
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,449
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,218
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,149,207,468
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
UConnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,266
10
518 INDEX
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 278
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,266
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,229
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,375,376
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,464
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,194,438
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,156,438
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
INDEX 519
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,173
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,58
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windows, Express Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,286,287
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,156
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . .
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,438
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 455
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Ì81-2Ç:È-Ç)*FÎ
$ISZTMFS--$
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.